public inbox for [email protected]  
help / color / mirror / Atom feed
[PATCH 06/21] One fewer (not one less)
24+ messages / 2 participants
[nested] [flat]

* [PATCH 06/21] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index 2a12071bad..7413748a71 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--jI8keyz6grp/JLjh
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less)
@ 2021-01-18 20:37  Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Justin Pryzby @ 2021-01-18 20:37 UTC (permalink / raw)

---
 contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c            | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml                  | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml          | 2 +-
 doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml                    | 2 +-
 src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c      | 4 ++--
 src/backend/commands/analyze.c             | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c      | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c           | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c         | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c          | 2 +-
 src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c          | 2 +-
 src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c                  | 2 +-
 src/include/pg_config_manual.h             | 4 ++--
 src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out     | 2 +-
 src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql          | 2 +-
 16 files changed, 18 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)

diff --git a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
index 9abcee32af..f6760eb31e 100644
--- a/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
+++ b/contrib/pageinspect/heapfuncs.c
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ tuple_data_split_internal(Oid relid, char *tupdata,
 		attr = TupleDescAttr(tupdesc, i);
 
 		/*
-		 * Tuple header can specify less attributes than tuple descriptor as
+		 * Tuple header can specify fewer attributes than tuple descriptor as
 		 * ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN without DEFAULT keyword does not actually
 		 * change tuples in pages, so attributes with numbers greater than
 		 * (t_infomask2 & HEAP_NATTS_MASK) should be treated as NULL.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
index cebc09ef91..1b00e543a6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/charset.sgml
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ SELECT * FROM test1 ORDER BY a || b COLLATE "fr_FR";
     name such as <literal>de_DE</literal> can be considered unique
     within a given database even though it would not be unique globally.
     Use of the stripped collation names is recommended, since it will
-    make one less thing you need to change if you decide to change to
+    make one fewer thing you need to change if you decide to change to
     another database encoding.  Note however that the <literal>default</literal>,
     <literal>C</literal>, and <literal>POSIX</literal> collations can be used regardless of
     the database encoding.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
index 0b24a55505..693423e524 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/create_type.sgml
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ CREATE TYPE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
    Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> version 8.3, the name of
    a generated array type was always exactly the element type's name with one
    underscore character (<literal>_</literal>) prepended.  (Type names were
-   therefore restricted in length to one less character than other names.)
+   therefore restricted in length to one fewer character than other names.)
    While this is still usually the case, the array type name may vary from
    this in case of maximum-length names or collisions with user type names
    that begin with underscore.  Writing code that depends on this convention
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
index e81addcfa9..aa172d102b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/rules.sgml
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable> AS
 <para>
     The query trees generated from rule actions are thrown into the
     rewrite system again, and maybe more rules get applied resulting
-    in more or less query trees.
+    in additional or fewer query trees.
     So a rule's actions must have either a different
     command type or a different result relation than the rule itself is
     on, otherwise this recursive process will end up in an infinite loop.
diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
index 24a27e387d..0b56b0fa5a 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c
@@ -719,11 +719,11 @@ heap_copytuple_with_tuple(HeapTuple src, HeapTuple dest)
 }
 
 /*
- * Expand a tuple which has less attributes than required. For each attribute
+ * Expand a tuple which has fewer attributes than required. For each attribute
  * not present in the sourceTuple, if there is a missing value that will be
  * used. Otherwise the attribute will be set to NULL.
  *
- * The source tuple must have less attributes than the required number.
+ * The source tuple must have fewer attributes than the required number.
  *
  * Only one of targetHeapTuple and targetMinimalTuple may be supplied. The
  * other argument must be NULL.
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
index 7295cf0215..64908ac39c 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr)
  * As of May 2004 we use a new two-stage method:  Stage one selects up
  * to targrows random blocks (or all blocks, if there aren't so many).
  * Stage two scans these blocks and uses the Vitter algorithm to create
- * a random sample of targrows rows (or less, if there are less in the
+ * a random sample of targrows rows (or fewer, if there are fewer in the
  * sample of blocks).  The two stages are executed simultaneously: each
  * block is processed as soon as stage one returns its number and while
  * the rows are read stage two controls which ones are to be inserted
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
index 4d185c27b4..078aaef539 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/jsonpath_exec.c
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static int	compareDatetime(Datum val1, Oid typid1, Datum val2, Oid typid2,
  *		implement @? and @@ operators, which in turn are intended to have an
  *		index support.  Thus, it's desirable to make it easier to achieve
  *		consistency between index scan results and sequential scan results.
- *		So, we throw as less errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
+ *		So, we throw as few errors as possible.  Regarding this function,
  *		such behavior also matches behavior of JSON_EXISTS() clause of
  *		SQL/JSON.  Regarding jsonb_path_match(), this function doesn't have
  *		an analogy in SQL/JSON, so we define its behavior on our own.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
index 47ca4ddbb5..52314d3aa1 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ scalarineqsel(PlannerInfo *root, Oid operator, bool isgt, bool iseq,
 
 			/*
 			 * The calculation so far gave us a selectivity for the "<=" case.
-			 * We'll have one less tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
+			 * We'll have one fewer tuple for "<" and one additional tuple for
 			 * ">=", the latter of which we'll reverse the selectivity for
 			 * below, so we can simply subtract one tuple for both cases.  The
 			 * cases that need this adjustment can be identified by iseq being
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
index fa2b49c676..55c9445898 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ GetCatCacheHashValue(CatCache *cache,
  *		It doesn't make any sense to specify all of the cache's key columns
  *		here: since the key is unique, there could be at most one match, so
  *		you ought to use SearchCatCache() instead.  Hence this function takes
- *		one less Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
+ *		one fewer Datum argument than SearchCatCache() does.
  *
  *		The caller must not modify the list object or the pointed-to tuples,
  *		and must call ReleaseCatCacheList() when done with the list.
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
index 0c327e823f..7348b86682 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/sampling.c
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ BlockSampler_Init(BlockSampler bs, BlockNumber nblocks, int samplesize,
 	bs->N = nblocks;			/* measured table size */
 
 	/*
-	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have less or not much
+	 * If we decide to reduce samplesize for tables that have fewer or not much
 	 * more than samplesize blocks, here is the place to do it.
 	 */
 	bs->n = samplesize;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
index e4ee1aab97..10a1effb74 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/freepage.c
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ FreePageManagerDump(FreePageManager *fpm)
  * if we search the parent page for the first key greater than or equal to
  * the first key on the current page, the downlink to this page will be either
  * the exact index returned by the search (if the first key decreased)
- * or one less (if the first key increased).
+ * or one fewer (if the first key increased).
  */
 static void
 FreePageBtreeAdjustAncestorKeys(FreePageManager *fpm, FreePageBtree *btp)
diff --git a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
index a4a3f40048..627a244fb7 100644
--- a/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
+++ b/src/bin/pgbench/pgbench.c
@@ -6458,7 +6458,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg)
 
 			/*
 			 * If advanceConnectionState changed client to finished state,
-			 * that's one less client that remains.
+			 * that's one fewer client that remains.
 			 */
 			if (st->state == CSTATE_FINISHED || st->state == CSTATE_ABORTED)
 				remains--;
diff --git a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
index d27c8601fa..e3d2e751ea 100644
--- a/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
+++ b/src/include/pg_config_manual.h
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * Changing this requires an initdb.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 
 /*
  * MAXPGPATH: standard size of a pathname buffer in PostgreSQL (hence,
- * maximum usable pathname length is one less).
+ * maximum usable pathname length is one fewer).
  *
  * We'd use a standard system header symbol for this, if there weren't
  * so many to choose from: MAXPATHLEN, MAX_PATH, PATH_MAX are all
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
index 67d3c7b4e4..9e73f1f1b1 100644
--- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 
 /*
  * Maximum length for identifiers (e.g. table names, column names,
- * function names).  Names actually are limited to one less byte than this,
+ * function names).  Names actually are limited to one fewer byte than this,
  * because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
  *
  * This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
diff --git a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
index 84f7eabb66..9799cfbdbd 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
+++ b/src/test/regress/expected/geometry.out
@@ -4325,7 +4325,7 @@ SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
  <(100,1),115>  | ((-15,1),(18.6827201635,82.3172798365),(100,116),(181.317279836,82.3172798365),(215,1),(181.317279836,-80.3172798365),(100,-114),(18.6827201635,-80.3172798365))
 (6 rows)
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 ERROR:  must request at least 2 points
 -- Zero radius error
diff --git a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
index 96df0ab05a..b0ab6d03ec 100644
--- a/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
+++ b/src/test/regress/sql/geometry.sql
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ SELECT f1, f1::polygon FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 -- To polygon with less points
 SELECT f1, polygon(8, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
--- Too less points error
+-- Too few points error
 SELECT f1, polygon(1, f1) FROM CIRCLE_TBL WHERE f1 >= '<(0,0),1>';
 
 -- Zero radius error
-- 
2.17.0


--lc9FT7cWel8HagAv
Content-Type: text/x-diff; charset=us-ascii
Content-Disposition: attachment;
 filename="0007-function-comment-get_am_name.patch"



^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread

* Removing the fixed-size buffer restriction in hba.c
@ 2023-07-24 17:53  Tom Lane <[email protected]>
  0 siblings, 0 replies; 24+ messages in thread

From: Tom Lane @ 2023-07-24 17:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
  To: [email protected]

We got a complaint at [1] about how a not-so-unreasonable LDAP
configuration can hit the "authentication file token too long,
skipping" error case in hba.c's next_token().  I think we've
seen similar complaints before, although a desultory archives
search didn't turn one up.

A minimum-change response would be to increase the MAX_TOKEN
constant from 256 to (say) 1K or 10K.  But it wouldn't be all
that hard to replace the fixed-size buffer with a StringInfo,
as attached.

Given the infrequency of complaints, I'm inclined to apply
the more thorough fix only in HEAD, and to just raise MAX_TOKEN
in the back branches.  Thoughts?

			regards, tom lane

[1] https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/PH0PR04MB8294A4C5A65D9D492CBBD349C002A%40PH0PR04MB8294.namprd0...



Attachments:

  [text/x-diff] v1-remove-hba-token-length-limit.patch (5.1K, ../../[email protected]/2-v1-remove-hba-token-length-limit.patch)
  download | inline diff:
diff --git a/src/backend/libpq/hba.c b/src/backend/libpq/hba.c
index 5d4ddbb04d..629463a00f 100644
--- a/src/backend/libpq/hba.c
+++ b/src/backend/libpq/hba.c
@@ -56,8 +56,6 @@
 #endif
 
 
-#define MAX_TOKEN	256
-
 /* callback data for check_network_callback */
 typedef struct check_network_data
 {
@@ -161,8 +159,8 @@ pg_isblank(const char c)
  * commas, beginning of line, and end of line.  Blank means space or tab.
  *
  * Tokens can be delimited by double quotes (this allows the inclusion of
- * blanks or '#', but not newlines).  As in SQL, write two double-quotes
- * to represent a double quote.
+ * commas, blanks, and '#', but not newlines).  As in SQL, write two
+ * double-quotes to represent a double quote.
  *
  * Comments (started by an unquoted '#') are skipped, i.e. the remainder
  * of the line is ignored.
@@ -171,7 +169,7 @@ pg_isblank(const char c)
  * Thus, if a continuation occurs within quoted text or a comment, the
  * quoted text or comment is considered to continue to the next line.)
  *
- * The token, if any, is returned at *buf (a buffer of size bufsz), and
+ * The token, if any, is returned into *buf, and
  * *lineptr is advanced past the token.
  *
  * Also, we set *initial_quote to indicate whether there was quoting before
@@ -180,30 +178,28 @@ pg_isblank(const char c)
  * we want to allow that to support embedded spaces in file paths.)
  *
  * We set *terminating_comma to indicate whether the token is terminated by a
- * comma (which is not returned).
+ * comma (which is not returned, nor advanced over).
  *
  * In event of an error, log a message at ereport level elevel, and also
- * set *err_msg to a string describing the error.  Currently the only
- * possible error is token too long for buf.
+ * set *err_msg to a string describing the error.  Currently no error
+ * conditions are defined.
  *
- * If successful: store null-terminated token at *buf and return true.
- * If no more tokens on line: set *buf = '\0' and return false.
+ * If successful: store dequoted token in *buf and return true.
+ * If no more tokens on line: set *buf to empty and return false.
  * If error: fill buf with truncated or misformatted token and return false.
  */
 static bool
-next_token(char **lineptr, char *buf, int bufsz,
+next_token(char **lineptr, StringInfo buf,
 		   bool *initial_quote, bool *terminating_comma,
 		   int elevel, char **err_msg)
 {
 	int			c;
-	char	   *start_buf = buf;
-	char	   *end_buf = buf + (bufsz - 1);
 	bool		in_quote = false;
 	bool		was_quote = false;
 	bool		saw_quote = false;
 
-	Assert(end_buf > start_buf);
-
+	/* Initialize output parameters */
+	resetStringInfo(buf);
 	*initial_quote = false;
 	*terminating_comma = false;
 
@@ -226,22 +222,6 @@ next_token(char **lineptr, char *buf, int bufsz,
 			break;
 		}
 
-		if (buf >= end_buf)
-		{
-			*buf = '\0';
-			ereport(elevel,
-					(errcode(ERRCODE_CONFIG_FILE_ERROR),
-					 errmsg("authentication file token too long, skipping: \"%s\"",
-							start_buf)));
-			*err_msg = "authentication file token too long";
-			/* Discard remainder of line */
-			while ((c = (*(*lineptr)++)) != '\0')
-				;
-			/* Un-eat the '\0', in case we're called again */
-			(*lineptr)--;
-			return false;
-		}
-
 		/* we do not pass back a terminating comma in the token */
 		if (c == ',' && !in_quote)
 		{
@@ -250,7 +230,7 @@ next_token(char **lineptr, char *buf, int bufsz,
 		}
 
 		if (c != '"' || was_quote)
-			*buf++ = c;
+			appendStringInfoChar(buf, c);
 
 		/* Literal double-quote is two double-quotes */
 		if (in_quote && c == '"')
@@ -262,7 +242,7 @@ next_token(char **lineptr, char *buf, int bufsz,
 		{
 			in_quote = !in_quote;
 			saw_quote = true;
-			if (buf == start_buf)
+			if (buf->len == 0)
 				*initial_quote = true;
 		}
 
@@ -275,9 +255,7 @@ next_token(char **lineptr, char *buf, int bufsz,
 	 */
 	(*lineptr)--;
 
-	*buf = '\0';
-
-	return (saw_quote || buf > start_buf);
+	return (saw_quote || buf->len > 0);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -409,21 +387,23 @@ static List *
 next_field_expand(const char *filename, char **lineptr,
 				  int elevel, int depth, char **err_msg)
 {
-	char		buf[MAX_TOKEN];
+	StringInfoData buf;
 	bool		trailing_comma;
 	bool		initial_quote;
 	List	   *tokens = NIL;
 
+	initStringInfo(&buf);
+
 	do
 	{
-		if (!next_token(lineptr, buf, sizeof(buf),
+		if (!next_token(lineptr, &buf,
 						&initial_quote, &trailing_comma,
 						elevel, err_msg))
 			break;
 
 		/* Is this referencing a file? */
-		if (!initial_quote && buf[0] == '@' && buf[1] != '\0')
-			tokens = tokenize_expand_file(tokens, filename, buf + 1,
+		if (!initial_quote && buf.len > 1 && buf.data[0] == '@')
+			tokens = tokenize_expand_file(tokens, filename, buf.data + 1,
 										  elevel, depth + 1, err_msg);
 		else
 		{
@@ -434,11 +414,13 @@ next_field_expand(const char *filename, char **lineptr,
 			 * for the list of tokens.
 			 */
 			oldcxt = MemoryContextSwitchTo(tokenize_context);
-			tokens = lappend(tokens, make_auth_token(buf, initial_quote));
+			tokens = lappend(tokens, make_auth_token(buf.data, initial_quote));
 			MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldcxt);
 		}
 	} while (trailing_comma && (*err_msg == NULL));
 
+	pfree(buf.data);
+
 	return tokens;
 }
 


^ permalink  raw  reply  [nested|flat] 24+ messages in thread


end of thread, other threads:[~2023-07-24 17:53 UTC | newest]

Thread overview: 24+ messages (download: mbox mbox.gz follow: Atom feed)
-- links below jump to the message on this page --
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/21] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2021-01-18 20:37 [PATCH 06/18] One fewer (not one less) Justin Pryzby <[email protected]>
2023-07-24 17:53 Removing the fixed-size buffer restriction in hba.c Tom Lane <[email protected]>

This inbox is served by agora; see mirroring instructions
for how to clone and mirror all data and code used for this inbox